WRANGLER - SUV JEEP - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 6.5/10 📄 608 pages PDF ⬇️ EN 💬 AI Question 🖨️ Print

USER MANUAL WRANGLER JEEP

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC SECTION

4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passenger vehicles are not intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” section for further information. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model INTRODUCTION described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer. If applicable, refer to the owners manual supplement for related information. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully. NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and remain with the vehicle when sold. When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction. ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.

Rollover Warning Label

6 INTRODUCTION Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Essential Information Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. INTRODUCTION Symbols Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual:

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Keyless Go and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob with a mechanical key and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped. KEYS Key Fob NOTE: The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) by pressing the appropriate button on the fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Key Fob

• In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled.

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Backup Mode Starting To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button, and push to operate the ignition switch. Push and release the key fob unlock button once to unlock the driver’s door only, or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate. When the key fob unlock button is pushed, the Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn signal lights will flash twice. To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash, and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. Key Fob Battery Replacement NOTE: When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be indicated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and the fob LED will no longer illuminate with a button press. The recommended replacement battery is CR2450. Backup Starting Method NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate .

1. Remove the back cover of the fob by inserting a flatblade screw driver into the slot on the bottom of the fob.

Pry until the cover unsnaps being careful not to damage the seal. Proceed counter-clockwise to pry the remaining snaps until the battery cover can be removed.

1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points Battery Replacement

2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small flatblade screwdriver into the battery removal slot and

sliding the battery forward and up being careful not to damage the electronic board underneath.

3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure the

positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery until it is seated securely below the tabs.

4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is properly

aligned before snapping it back in place. Programming Additional Key Fobs Programming the key fob may be performed by your authorized dealer.

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Request For Additional Key Fobs General Information NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: WARNING!

• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF mode. Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. IGNITION SWITCH NOTE: Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition

• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.

• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the vehicle locks. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several operating modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch. The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes: OFF

• The engine is stopped.

• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.) are still available. ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available. RUN
• All the electrical devices are available. START
• The engine will start. WARNING! START/STOP Ignition Button

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. (Continued)

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. NOTE: Refer to ⬙Starting The Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further information. Vehicle On Message When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster. NOTE: The power window switches will remain active up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

WARNING! (Continued)

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m). The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above 80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C). Refer to “Heated Seats” and in “Seats” in this section for further information. NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range. How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off.

• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

• Fuel level meets minimum requirement

• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the ON/RUN position.

• Malfunction indicator light not illuminated

• The vehicle must be started with the key after two consecutive timeouts. All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position

• All removable doors must not be removed WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Swing Gate Open

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute cycle. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request. To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP button. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument cluster display until you push the ignition START button.

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped SENTRY KEY When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Controls, optional heated seats, and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C). These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position. The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized operation by disabling the vehicle. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The system uses the key fob to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine. After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

CAUTION! The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Replacement Keys NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: CAUTION!

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks are disabled. The vehicle security alarm provides both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash. Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security alarm will rearm itself. To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”

position (refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further information).

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the

• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.

• The driver’s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security alarm. CAUTION!

• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. Manual Door Locks All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. Manual Door Lock

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, glove compartment, and console storage. WARNING!

• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the ignition and remove the key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Power Door Locks — If Equipped The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel. Push the switch forward to lock the doors, and rearward to unlock the doors. Power Door Lock Switch 1 — Lock Button 2 — Unlock Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the ignition and remove the key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If Equipped) The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and swing gate without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the passive entry system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach (Low Beams, License Plate Lamp, Position Lamps) for whichever time duration is set between 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn signal lamps.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock From The Driver Side To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all doors and the swing gate automatically. NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function only if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Push” is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:

• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open. When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle⬙ remains active/functional. To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, pushing the passive entry lock button will lock the vehicle doors and the swing gate. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• A valid Passive Entry key fob is also detected outside of the vehicle.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs. Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors. NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle.

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors & the swing gate will unlock when you grab hold of the swing gate handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate The Swing Gate passive entry unlock feature is built into handle of the Swing Gate. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the Swing Gate, grab the Swing Gate handle to unlock the Swing Gate automatically, and pull the Swing Gate to open. Swing Gate Passive Entry Location To Lock The Swing Gate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the swing gate, pushing the passive entry lock button will lock the vehicle doors and the swing gate.

3. Repeat steps one and two for the opposite rear door.

• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using any Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.

• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle⬙ remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead. Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with ChildProtection Door Lock system. To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate

to the lock or unlock position. Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock lever rearward (located on the door trim panel), roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle. Front Door Removal WARNING! Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only. Door Removal Warning Label WARNING! All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road operation with doors removed. NOTE:

• Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
• Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower

outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).

3. Remove the check screw from the center door check

(using a #T40 Torx head driver). NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.

Door Check (Detached) Hinge Pin Screw

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the instrument panel by sliding the plastic panel along the door

frame toward the seats until the tabs are detached.

5. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring

harness. Closed Wiring Harness Wiring Access Door NOTE: Do not pry back to open, as this will break the plastic cover. 1 – Locking Tab 2 – Wiring Harness

6. Push and hold down the black security tab under the

wiring harness, and lift the harness into the open position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

NOTE: The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling. Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) WARNING! Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only. Open Wiring Harness 1 – Wiring Harness 2 – Security Tab

7. With the wiring harness open, pull downward on the

wiring connector to unplug. Store wiring connector in the lower door basket.

8. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins

from their hinges and remove the door. To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the opposite order. Door Removal Warning Label

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road operation with doors removed. NOTE:

• Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
• Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower

outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver). NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear load floor. Hinge Pin Screw

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43

3. Remove the check screw from the center door check

(using a #T40 Torx head driver).

5. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access door

from the bottom of the B-pillar.

Door Check (Attached)

4. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.

NOTE: Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness. This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wiring connector to be unplugged. NOTE: The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling. SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. WARNING! Wiring Connector

7. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins

from their hinges and remove the door. To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the opposite order.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45

Manual Front Seats Front Seat Adjustment The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. Adjustment Bar Location WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Seat Height Adjustment The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push downward on the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes may be necessary to achieve the desired position. Recline Strap WARNING! Seat Height Adjustment Front Seatback Recline To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean forward or backward, depending on the direction you would like the seatback to move. Release the strap when the desired position is reached and the seatback will lock into place. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47

Lumbar Support The lumbar control knob is located on the outboard side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.

Heated Seat Buttons Lumbar Control Knob Heated Seats — If Equipped The heated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel below the touchscreen, and are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Push the heated seat button setting on. once to turn the HI

• Push the heated seat button the MED setting on. a second time to turn

• Push the heated seat button LO setting on. a third time to turn the

• Push the heated seat button heating elements off. a fourth time to turn the

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
• The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49

Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two Door Models Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the outboard side of the seat back, and slide the entire seat forward. NOTE:

• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which returns the seat to its original position.
• The recline strap and easy entry lever should not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position. 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space. NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily. Easy Entry Lever To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the seatback upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the track locks.

• The center head restraints must be in the lowest position to avoid contact with the center console when folding the seat.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. To Fold Down The Rear Seat There are two release levers located on each upper outboard side of the rear seat. The larger of the two release levers folds down the seat and the head restraint simultaneously. The smaller lever folds down the head restraint independently for improved visibility. To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release lever and slowly fold down the seatback. The head restraint will fold automatically with the seat when this lever is pulled. Seatback Release Lever NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal. By simply opening the seats to the open position, the seat cushion will return to its normal shape over time.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51

To Raise The Rear Seat Folding The Rear Seat Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then, raise the head restraint until it locks into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.

1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback

WARNING! Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models NOTE:

• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily. Rear Seatback Release Lever

2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Using The Retention Straps Removing The Rear Seat

1. There are two retention straps located on the back of the

rear seat and two corresponding wire loops located on the back of each b-pillar. Open the velcro on the strap and thread through the wire loop. Fold the velcro over to keep the seat in the folded position. This should be done on both sides.

1. Push down on the release bar on each side, and pull the

seat out and away from the lower bracket. Release Bar Location

2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.

3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these steps.

Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap

2. To return the seat to its normal upright position, reverse

these steps. NOTE: Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the rear seat latches.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats are fully latched. Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull strap under the head restraint and pull it forward.

Rear Seat Armrest NOTE: The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning. WARNING! Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEAD RESTRAINTS Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate height. WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. The release button does not need to be pushed to adjust the head restraint. Front Head Restraint 1 — Release Button 2 — Adjustment Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head. Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable, but foldable head restraints. To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the release strap located on the upper outboard side of each rear seat.

Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Location

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! Rear Head Restraints Folded To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up on the head restraint until it locks into place. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for information on child seat tether routing.

• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head restraints installed while passengers are occupying the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area without the head restraints installed are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57

Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an adjustable, removable center head restraint.

To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the smaller of the release levers, located on the upper outboard side of the rear seat. Rear Head Restraint Folded To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up on the head restraint until it locks into place. To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push down on the head restraint. Rear Head Restraint Lever To remove the center head restraint, push the release button, located on the base of the head restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint.

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To install the head restraint, hold the release button while pushing downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for information on child seat tether routing. NOTE: Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with the center console when folding the seat down. STEERING WHEEL Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever. Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control handle upward until fully engaged.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm. The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center of the instrument panel below the touchscreen and within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Push the heated steering wheel button the heating element on. once to turn

• Push the heated steering wheel button to turn the heating element off. a second time Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare from vehicles behind you. NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view. Automatic Dimming Mirror Adjusting Rearview Mirror

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61

The Automatic Dimming feature can be turn on or off through the touchscreen.

• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature on.

• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn the feature off. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. Outside Rearview Mirror WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror.

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Mirrors — If Equipped The power mirror controls are located on the door panel next to the door handle. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. Vanity Mirrors Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. Power Mirror Switch The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Vanity Mirror

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63

EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights — if equipped. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light, and instrument panel light operation. Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level when shifted into any position other than PARK (auto transmission) or when the vehicle begins to move (manual transmission). NOTE: The Daytime Running Light, on the same side of the vehicle as the active turn signal, will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating. Headlight Switch

High/Low Beam Switch Flash-To-Pass Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pull the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel to return the lights to low beams. You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released. Automatic Headlights — If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position. Multifunction Lever NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or low beam headlights and push in the center of the headlight switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob a second time will turn the front fog lights off. NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. Lane Change Assist — If Equipped Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. Lights-On Reminder If the headlights, parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened. INTERIOR LIGHTS Front Fog Light Switch Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. Courtesy Lights The courtesy lights will turn on when the front doors are opened, by rotating the dimmer controls on the headlight switch fully upward, or, if equipped, when the unlock button is pushed on the key fob.

The interior courtesy lights are located in the center of the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center light and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light can be turned on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second time will turn the light off. Dimmer Controls The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and are located on the left side of the instrument panel. Dimmer Controls Dome Lights When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known as “Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and ambient light levels.

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in this section for further information on using the rear window wiper/ washer. Front Wiper Control CAUTION! Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Intermittent Wiper System Windshield Washers Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of four intermittent settings. The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds. To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will resume. If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers will turn off. WARNING! Front Wiper Control NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled. Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Mist Feature Pull up on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held up, the wipers will continue to operate.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. Mist Control Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped A rotary switch on the center portion of the windshield wiper/washer lever controls the operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Push the wiper lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. The washer pump and wiper will continue to operate as long as the lever is held. If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return to the “park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at.

70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Climate Control Overview The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. Manual Climate Controls – Heater Only Manual Climate Controls

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71

Manual Climate Control Descriptions Icon Description A/C Button Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED illuminates when the A/C system is engaged. MAX A/C Setting Turn the temperature control knob to the MAX Air Conditioning (A/C) setting to engage MAX Air Conditioning (A/C). This is the coldest setting. Recirculation Button Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. NOTE:

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

Icon Description Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes. Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Blower Control There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position. Modes Control Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73

Icon Bi-Level Mode Floor Mode Mix Mode Description Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Front Defrost Mode Turn the Knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.

Automatic Climate Controls Overview The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio. Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Control Descriptions Icon Description MAX A/C Button Press to change to the coldest setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again causes the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator turns off. A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Recirculation Button Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77

Icon Description Front Defrost Button The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting. Rear Defrost Button The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after a short period of time. Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Faceplate Knob Touchscreen Buttons Panel Mode Description Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.

• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. Modes Control Press the button to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79

Icon Bi-Level Mode Floor Mode Mix Mode Description Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Climate Control OFF Button This button turns the Climate Control System off.

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Climate Control Functions Air Conditioning (A/C) The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to turn the air conditioning system on and off. When the system is turned on, cool dehumidified air flows through the vents into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning off and adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Make sure to only select Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes. NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or windows, select Defrost mode and increase the blower speed.
• If the air conditioning performance is lower than expected, there may a blockage. Gently clean the area around the radiator with water.

The MAX A/C setting provides the maximum cooling performance. Press the button to toggle between MAX A/C and your prior setting. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on. In the MAX A/C setting, you can adjust the blower level and mode position. Pressing other settings causes the MAX A/C operation to switch to your desired setting. Recirculation The Recirculation button helps remove smoke, odors, or high humidity from the cabin. The indicator illuminates when Recirculation mode is on. Press the button again to turn it off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81

NOTE: Using Recirculation in cold weather may cause the windows to fog up and this mode may be unavailable on the touchscreen. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO

button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system

to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is

not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. Manual Operation Override This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.

Operating Tips Window Fogging NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur. Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging. Vacation/Storage Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. Cabin Air Filter The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.

The power window switches are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. Push the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the window. The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window. WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Power Window Switches

• The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after ignition is switched to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85

Four-Door Models The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window, and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window. For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes the necessary tools required for the operations described in the following sections. All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting the window opening. DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the soft top system will be provided in a separate box located in the rear of the vehicle for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops being installed at the same time. Provided Tools

Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models

1. Fully lower the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Four Door

Models” in this section.

3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,

unscrew the two Torx head screws on each lift assist mechanism, then lift the mechanism up and away from the vehicle.

2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on both the driver’s

and passenger’s sides are in the “lock” position before removing. Lift Assist Mechanism Lock Position 1 — Lock Position 2 — Torx Head Screw 3 — Torx Head Screw

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87

4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail rearward to

release the side link from the track.

Pull To Release Top From Track

5. Repeat on the opposite side.

Release Lever Location

6. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a

clean, dry location (another person may be needed to help with this operation). NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold the bundle up, the other to remove the brackets.

88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,

unscrew the Torx screw on both rear corners of the vehicle, removing the retainers. Installing The Soft Top — Four Door Models NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in this section.

1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top

• Right and left side door frames
• Eight door frame attachment Torx head screws
• Right and left side quarter windows

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Rear Hard Top Removal” in this section.

Remove Rear Retainers

3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame Installation — Four Door Models” in this section.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89

4. Install the rear retainers on each side of the rear of the

vehicle using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to the table below for recommended torque specifications.

5. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in the “lock”

position, lift the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the side links pointing toward the front. Lower the lift assist mechanisms onto its retainers on both sides (on the inside of the sport bar). Installing Rear Retainers Soft Top In Place Torque Specification For Torx Screw

NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold the soft top up, the other to align the brackets.

6. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,

tighten the Torx screws by turning them clockwise. Secure them until they are snug (refer to the table below for recommended torque specifications), being careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Repeat on the opposite side. Torque Specification For Torx Screws

CAUTION! Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws if they are overtightened. Lift Assist Mechanism In Place 1 — Lock Position 2 — Torx Head Screw 3 — Torx Head Screw

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91

7. While pulling the release lever on the top of the rail

rearward, place the side link into the guide track on the top of the rail then release the lever. NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.

FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD

8. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover

should be discarded. It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only. NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap.

9. Raise the soft top. Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this

• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the front header, sport bar, and body side or fully removed. Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior. (Continued)

92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. Front Panel(s) Removal NOTE: The driver’s side panel must be removed before removing the passenger’s side panel.

1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.

2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the driver’s side panel

(one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking them from the roof. Roof Panel Lock Locations

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93

3. Unlatch the driver’s side header panel latch located at

the top of the windshield. Freedom Top Storage Bag Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular Hard Top, come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to store your Freedom Top panels. The storage bag contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat. Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap. NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag.

1. Insert the left side Freedom panel into the bag with the

latches facing upward. Header Panel Latch Locations 1 — Header Panel Latches 2 — Unlatched Position

4. Remove the driver’s side panel.

panel. Left Panel — Latches Facing Upward

2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is

3. Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the

latches facing downward. Fold Divider Over Left Panel Right Panel — Latches Facing Downward NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95

4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed.

6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints

and loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat. Front Panel(s) Installation

1. Set the passenger side panel on the windshield frame

with the locating pin in the front receiver mounting hole followed by the driver’s side panel, making sure there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body.

2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal

in reverse order. Storage Bag Closed

5. Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and

straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clip at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorage, located at the base of the rear seat.

96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Hard Top Removal

1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)

Removal” in this section.

4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard

top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside — three screws on each side) using the #50 Torx head driver.

3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,

remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the front door). Step Four Step Three

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97

5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of

the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.

6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on the left rear

inside corner of the vehicle.

7. Release the locking tab by pushing it downward.

8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab inward

while pulling downward to disconnect. Push Locking Tab Downward Push Tab Inward

Pull Wiring Harness To Separate Release Button On Hose

10. Lower the rear window, and close the swing gate.

9. To remove the washer hose, push the release button on

hose connector, and pull downward.

11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard

top on a soft surface to prevent damage. CAUTION! The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution could damage the Freedom Top.

100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top. Refer to “Door Frame” in this section for installation procedures.

1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if

2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in

reverse order. Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top. NOTE:

• The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body should be torqued to 88 in lb +/- 22 in lb (10 N·m +/2.5 N·m) using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet. DOOR FRAME WARNING!
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew:
• Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

2. Once all the way loosened, remove the screws by

pulling downward. NOTE: Screws will not fall out once completely loose, as they are held in place by an internal mechanism. Door Frame Removal NOTE: In four door models, the rear door frames must be removed first, followed by the front door frames.

1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,

loosen the Torx screws located on the underside of each door frame (two per door). Remove Screws From Below Frame Door Frame Screw Locations

3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.

• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only. Door Frame Installation Four Door Models — If Equipped Step Three

4. Store screws in a secure location.

5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame (four door

1. Install the front door rail first.

2. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal at

the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for the Torx head screws (two for each door).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103

3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and

insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.

4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of the

body side, just behind the rear door opening.

Step Four Step Three CAUTION! Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws if they are overtightened.

104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the

rear of the front door rail, making sure rubber seals lay flat. Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.

6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and

insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Position Of Frame Above Door Step Six 1 — Front Door Rail 2 — Rear Door Frame

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105

Door Frame Installation Two Door Models — If Equipped

1. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal at

the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for the Torx head screws (two for each door).

2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and

insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Step Two CAUTION! Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws if they are overtightened. SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window up/removed unless the quarter windows are also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
• The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements. Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch points when installing and removing the soft tops. The lift assist mechanism and side bows may cause serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in between.

106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! CAUTION! The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).

• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash. Window scratches and wax build up may result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed. Window and top damage may occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models” in “Bodywork” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing. Damage to the top may result. Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top. Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains. (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107

CAUTION! (Continued) lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

#6 Bow Rear Quarter Window Lower Window Retainer Front Window Retainer

Rear View Top And Components 1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points 2 — Quarter Window Pillars 3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers NOTE: The rear window and rear quarter windows must be removed before lowering the soft top to prevent damage to the top. Clean the side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top. If the plastic retainers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products are available through an authorized dealer.

110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Remove The Rear Window:

1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear window’s

plastic retainers from the lower right and left corners.

2. Grasp the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and upward

releasing it from both the right and left retainers. Step Two (Left Side Shown) Step One

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111

3. While holding the window in place, slide the tailgate bar

to the left separating it from the rear window. Store in soft window bag, or a safe location.

4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter window

5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the left

until it is completely separate from its retainer. Do not pull downward while removing the rear window. Damage to the retainer could result. Step Five Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:

1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner

outward and release tab from the bottom of the window pillar. Step One

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113

2. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic retainer

from along the bottom of the window moving toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Remove plastic retainer from bottom to top of the

4. While keeping the window level, slide rearward until it

is completely separate from its retainer. Do not pull downward while removing the window. Damage to the retainer could result. Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider Position

1. After removing the rear window and quarter panel

windows, move to the front of the vehicle.

2. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.

3. Release the header latches from the crossbar by pulling

the handle downward. Make sure the hook is disengaged from its receiver. Step Four

5. Store in soft window bag or a safe location.

4. From both the driver and passenger sides, lift up on the

#1 Bow of the soft top to start the operation. NOTE: If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider position, secure the top by using the two velcro straps provided in the center console.

5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link to

fold the soft top rearward into the Sunrider position. Secured Top When In Sunrider Position

116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Lowering The Soft Top Into Fully Lowered Position

1. From the Sunrider position, remove straps if previously

secured and move to the rear of the vehicle.

3. Pull the latch downward to release the top, and allow

the soft top to slide rearward freely in the guide tracks to the stowed position.

2. Locate the Sunrider latch beneath the #6 Bow of the soft

4. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft

top, slide the lock lever on the driver and passenger side lift assist mechanisms to the “lock” position.

Lock Position Step Four

5. Once the lock is in the “lock” position, push downward

on each side of the folded soft top to ensure it is secure. An audible “click” may be heard.

118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Raising The Soft Top Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered Position

1. While pushing down on the rear of the top, slide the

lock lever on the driver and passenger side Lift Assist Mechanisms to the “unlock” position. Unlocked Position Push Down While Unlocking

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119

2. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along the guide

track until it locks into the Sunrider position with an audible “click”.

4. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward the

front of the vehicle guiding the top into the closed position.

3. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the top is

locked in the Sunrider position. Lower Top Into Closed Position

120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header

latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver. Repeat on the other side.

6. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the latch

plate, locking the latch into place. Step Six Step Five

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121

Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows

1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the

window into the retainer and slide forward while keeping the window level. Repeat on the other side.

2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the top

cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.

3. Engage the plastic retainers along the bottom of the

quarter window and up the front of the window. Repeat on the other side. Step Three

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123

Install The Rear Window

1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from left to

right while keeping the window level.

2. Insert the tailgate bar into the retainers at the bottom of

the window from left to the right.

3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right side

5. Repeat with the driver’s side quarter window.

Step Five Step Three

4. Line up the rear window to the passenger side quarter

window first, and engage the plastic retainers.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125

6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right and

left corners. WARNING! (Continued)

• The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements. Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch points when installing and removing the soft tops. The lift assist mechanism and side bows may cause serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in between. CAUTION! Step Six SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window up/removed unless the quarter windows are also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers. (Continued) The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).

126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top. Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains. CAUTION!

• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash. Window scratches and wax build up may result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed. Window and top damage may occur. (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)
• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models” in “Bodywork” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing. Damage to the top may result. Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127

Lowering The Soft Top

#6 Bow Rear Quarter Window Lower Window Retainer Front Window Retainer

128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear View Top And Components 1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points 2 — Quarter Window Pillars 3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers NOTE: The rear window and rear quarter windows must be removed before lowering the soft top to prevent damage to the top. Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top. If the plastic retainers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129

Remove The Rear Window:

1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear window’s

plastic retainers from the lower right and left corners.

2. Grasp the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and upward

releasing it from both the right and left retainers.

3. While holding the window in place, slide the tailgate bar

to the left separating it from the rear window. Store in soft window bag, or a safe location.

4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter window

pillars. Step Four Step Three

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131

5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the left

until it is completely separate from its retainer. Do not pull downward while removing the rear window. Damage to the retainer could result. Step Five Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:

1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner

outward and release tab from the bottom of the window pillar. Step One

2. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic retainer

from along the bottom of the window moving toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to the top of

the front window. Step Three Step Two

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133

4. While keeping the window level, slide rearward until it

is completely separate from its retainer. Do not pull downward while removing the window. Damage to the retainer could result. Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider Position

1. After removing the rear window and quarter panel

windows, move to the front of the vehicle.

2. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.

3. Release the header latches from the crossbar by pulling

the handle downward. Make sure the hook is disengaged from its receiver. Step Four

5. Store in soft window bag or a safe location.

4. From both the driver and passenger sides, lift up on the

#1 Bow of the soft top to start the operation.

5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link to

fold the soft top rearward into the Sunrider position. Step Four Step Five

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135

NOTE: If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider position, secure the top by using the two velcro straps provided in the center console. Lowering The Soft Top Into Fully Lowered Position

1. From the Sunrider position, remove straps if previously

secured and move to the rear of the vehicle.

2. Locate the Sunrider latch beneath the #6 Bow of the soft

top on the driver’s side. Secured Top When In Sunrider Position Sunrider Latch Beneath #6 Bow

3. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow the soft top to

slide rearward freely in the guide tracks to the stowed position.

4. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft

top, slide the lock lever on the driver and passenger side lift assist mechanisms to the “lock” position. Step Three Step Four (Locked Position)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137

5. Once the lock is in the “lock” position, push downward

on each side of the folded soft top to ensure it is secure. An audible “click” may be heard. Raising The Soft Top Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered Position

1. While pushing down on the rear of the top, slide the

lock lever on the driver and passenger side Lift Assist Mechanisms to the “unlock” position. Step Five Unlocked Position

2. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along the guide

track until it locks into the Sunrider position with an audible “click”.

4. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward the

front of the vehicle manually guiding the top into the closed position. Step Two Lift From Side Link

3. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the top is

locked in the Sunrider position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139

5. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header

latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver. Repeat on the other side.

Lower Top Into Closed Position Step Five

140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

6. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the hook,

locking the latch into place. Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows

1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the

window into the retainer and slide forward while keeping the window level. Repeat on the other side. Step Six Step One

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141

2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the top

cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.

3. Engage the plastic retainers along the bottom of the

quarter window and up the front of the window. Repeat on the other side. Step Three Install The Rear Window

1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from left to

right while keeping the window level. Step One

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143

2. Insert the tailgate bar into the retainers at the bottom of

the window from left to the right.

3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right side

4. Line up the rear window to the passenger side quarter

window first, and engage the plastic retainers.

6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right and

5. Repeat with the driver’s side quarter window.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the control switch can be found on the front trim panel, to the right of the driver’s side sun visor.

• The Power Top is non-removable. If desired, the rear quarter windows can be removed and stored in provided storage bags. Refer to “Quarter Window Removal” in this section for further information.
• The Power Top will not open in temperatures below –4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened at a higher temperature, it can be closed at temperatures above –40°F (-40°C).
• The Power Top will not operate at vehicle speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h). WARNING! Power Sliding Top Control Switch 1 — Open Switch 2 — Close Switch

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power top while operating the power top switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. (Continued)

146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open power top. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the power top. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the power top opening. Injury may result. Opening The Power Top Express Mode Push the open switch and release it within one-half second. The power top will open automatically to the open position. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the open switch will stop the power top. Manual Mode To open the power top manually, push and hold the open switch. The power top will stop automatically at the open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The power top will remain in a partially opened position until the switch is pushed and held again. Closing The Power Top Express Mode Push the close switch and release it within one-half second. The power top will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the power top. Manual Mode To close the power top manually, push and hold the close switch. The power top will move forward and automatically stop at the fully closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The power top will remain in a partially closed position until the switch is pushed and held again. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the power top in certain open or partially open

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147

positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the power top open, adjust the power top opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the power top during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the power top is detected, the power top will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the close switch and release to Express Close. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the power top is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the top’s path before closing. NOTE: If three consecutive power top close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the power top must be closed in Manual Mode. Power Top Maintenance Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the quarter window glass panel. Refer to “Bodywork” in Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle. Ignition Off Operation The power top switch can remain active in Accessory Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to the Off position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Multimedia” for further information. Relearn Procedure For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is a relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the power top when the “Express Mode” stops working. To reset the power top, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.

2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed position.

3. Push and hold the Close switch for 10 seconds. This will

put the power top into calibration mode.

4. Continue holding down the close button while the top

goes fully open and then back to fully close.

3. Locate the rear quarter window latches (one on each

window) on the interior of the windows.

4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to release.

5. Rotate the right hand side latch counterclockwise to

5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully closed

position, release the close button. The power top is now reset and ready to use. NOTE: If the close button is released anytime during the relearning process, the relearn may not be complete, and the procedure must be repeated. Rear Quarter Window Removal On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the rear quarter windows can be removed. To remove these windows, follow the procedure below:

1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear window.

2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter windows.

Rear Quarter Window Release Latches 1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise 2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise

6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each window

upward and away from the vehicle. NOTE: Do not pull down or apply any weight to the windows after the latches are released. Damage could result to the pins holding the windows in place.

Quarter Window Pins Location

7. Store the rear quarter windows in the provided storage

bag and keep in a safe location, or securely fasten the bag to the rear seat. Lift Quarter Window Upward And Outward

150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural element that can provide some protection in some accidents. The windshield also provides some protection against weather, road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects. Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down, as you lose the protection this structural element can provide. If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can be folded down. However, the protection afforded by the windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield, drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road with the windshield folded down. Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required its removal is completed and before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your passengers should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down. Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see an authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use. WARNING! Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury:

• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down.
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is securely fastened, either up or down.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all times when the windshield is down.
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield. Make sure that the folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers’ protection in some accidents.
• If you remove the doors, store them outside the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door may cause personal injury.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151

Lowering The Windshield

1. Lower the soft top or remove the hard top following the

instructions in this manual.

5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, remove the

four Torx screws located along the interior of the windshield.

2. Manually remove the protective caps over the windshield wiper hex bolts.

Interior Torx Screw Locations NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping. Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt

3. Using the provided 15mm socket, remove the two hex

bolts and remove the wiper arms.

4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun

6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the footman loop bumpers (if equipped).

Raising The Windshield

1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the

2. Raise the windshield.

3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, reinstall the

four Torx screws located along the interior of the windshield. Secure them until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Footman Loop Bumpers 1 — Bumper 2 — Footman Loop 3 — Washer Nozzle

7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through

the footman loops on either side of the hood and on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place. Interior Torx Screw Locations

provided 15mm socket, reinstall the two hex bolts securing the wiper arms. Secure them until they are snug, careful not to over tighten. HOOD Opening The Hood Release both the hood latches.

and push gently until they snap into place. Hood Latch Locations Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood.

154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Closing The Hood To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. Swing Gate Handle

The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key, Remote Keyless Entry key fob, by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors, or grabbing the handle if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To open the swing gate, pull on the gate handle. NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to close the swing gate (hard top models only). WARNING! Driving with the flip-up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed when you are operating the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155

CAUTION! Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing the rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade will result. Cargo Area Features To install the adjustable slide, proceed as follows:

1. Place the slide into the rail while in the horizontal

position. Then rotate the slide 90 degrees into the vertical position, securing it into the rail. Repeat on the other side. Trail Rail Cargo Organizer — If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the Trail Rail system, a rail will be found built into the floor on either side of the cargo area. An organizer bar fits into slides in the rail to create an adjustable barrier. Installing Adjustable Slides 1 — Place In Rail Horizontally 2 — Rotate 90° To Lock In Place

2. Lower the organizer bar into the holes on the top of each

slide, locking them in place. Trail Rail Organizer Bar

3. Adjust the bar to the desired position by sliding the bar

up or down the rails.

4. To lock the slides in place, using your auxiliary key from

your key fob, insert the key into the keyhole on the rearward end of the slide and turn to lock. Lower Bar Into Slides — Slide To Adjust Use Auxiliary Key To Lock Slides

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery. Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming. The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console, designate the three different HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system. To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange indicator flashes. NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. NOTE: It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to

program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator

light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate

the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed

HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete. NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling Code) To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining

steps.⬙ Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to

program while you press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator

light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and

observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. Canadian/Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission. Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-Rolling Code) It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while

you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.

When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming. If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/ Gate Operator) To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and

observe the indicator light.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/

Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all remaining steps. NOTE: Using HomeLink

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163

General Information INTERNAL EQUIPMENT The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: Storage This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Glove Compartment

Console Storage Compartment Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert the ignition key and turn. To open the storage compartment, pull up on the latch and lift the cover. The rear cargo area storage compartment is located underneath the load floor. To access the storage compartment, lift up on the cover cutout at the rear of the cargo area. Center Console Rear Storage Cover

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165

Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console. The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center console, near the floor.

Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders

166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

There are also cupholders located in the rear seat armrest, if equipped. Electrical Power Outlets There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets that can provide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters. The front power outlet is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls, and is powered from the ignition switch. Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. Rear Seat Armrest Cupholders Front Power Outlet

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 167

On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a second power outlet located in the rear cargo area and is powered directly from the vehicle battery.

Power Outlets Fuse Locations Rear Cargo Power Outlet 1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all times) 2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage. WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 169

Power Inverter — If Equipped There is a 115 or 230 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools. The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Inverter

Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped Four auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel can be used to power various electrical devices. You have the ability to configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect settings. All switches can be configured for setting the switch type operation to latching or momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles. Auxiliary Switches NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition. For more information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in Multimedia.” The auxiliary switches control relays that power four blunt cut wires located in the interior passenger outboard foot well area and on the right side of the engine compartment near the battery. Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood

NOTE: Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models ONLY. The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg), this includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area. Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached. Auxiliary Switch Connections – Passenger Side Panel In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the interior, in the passenger outboard foot well area. A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/installation of your electrical devices. NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer through Mopar parts. External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. CAUTION!

• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load. (Continued)

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first, with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call your authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. CAUTION! CAUTION! Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call your authorized dealer for service.

2. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

3. Instrument Cluster Display

• The instrument cluster display features a driverinteractive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.
• Indicates vehicle speed. Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). CAUTION! Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.

2. Instrument Cluster Display

• The instrument cluster display features a driverinteractive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• Indicates vehicle speed.
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.

5. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call your authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.

CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call your authorized dealer for service. through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments. Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instrument cluster.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel: Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

• Up Arrow Button Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the Main Menu items.

180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Down Arrow Button Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the Main Menu items.
• Right Arrow Button Push and release the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button Push and release the left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
• OK Button Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset. The Main Menu items consists of the following:

• Screen Setup Oil Change Reset Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the

ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ in the

instrument cluster display.

3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to

100%. Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the

ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the

ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle features. Speedometer Push and release the up or down arrow button until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h. Vehicle Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to scroll through the information submenus and push and release the OK button to select or reset the resettable submenus.

Off Road Fuel Economy Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to scroll through the information submenus. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.

• Drivetrain Toggle left or right to select a display with or without Current Fuel Economy Information.

• Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and numerical value of calculated average front wheel angle from the steering wheel orientation.
• Transfer Case Lock Status: displays ⬙Lock⬙ graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low status.
• Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped): displays front and rear or rear only axle locker graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with text message (connected or disconnected).
• Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the graphic with the angle number on the screen. NOTE: When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers, and the graphic will be greyed out.

• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles, the Range display will change to a “LOW” message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message and a new Range value will display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.

• Phone Call Status Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display, then push and release the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the phone is answered or ignored.

• Distance NOTE: The call status will temporarily replace the previous media source information displayed on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the last used screen.

• Average Fuel Economy Messages

• Elapsed Time Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are. The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following: Hold the OK button to reset all the information. Stop/Start — If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start status. Audio Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This menu will display the audio source information, including the Song name, Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying graphic. When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a closed envelope, and “No Stored Messages” will display. Screen Setup Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.

• Average MPG Upper Left

• Average MPG Upper Right

• Restore Current Gear The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK button to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument cluster display.

• Off Road – If Equipped (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy (show/hide)
• Trip Info (Show/Hide)
• Screen Setup Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery. In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads. Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.

186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster display. These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain. NOTE:

• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning Light” in “Warning Lights And Messages” located in ”Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• 150W Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187

• The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and similar devices.

• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode”)

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: – Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior) – Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports – Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) – Check the audio settings (volume) After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time). The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Red Warning Lights — Air Bag Warning Light This light indicates a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault

with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. — Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by your authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. — Battery Charge Warning Light This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. — Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light This light will turn on when there’s a fault with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed. This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component. — Door Open Warning Light

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. — Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will be sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool: whichever comes first. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. — Hood Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. — Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. — Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light This light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Safety” for further information. — Swing Gate Open Warning Light This indicator will turn when the swing gate is open. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. — Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped This light indicates high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally. WARNING! If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. CAUTION! Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. — Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. Yellow Warning Lights — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event. — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light — If Equipped — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning Light — If Equipped This light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. — Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If Equipped This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

— Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will sound. The light will remain on until fuel is added. — Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low. — Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. — Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact your authorized dealer for service. — Speed Control Fault Warning Light This telltale will illuminate to indicate the Speed Control System is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact your authorized dealer. — Sway Bar Fault Warning Light This light will illuminate when there is a fault in the sway bar disconnect system. — Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. CAUTION! Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued) damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. Yellow Indicator Lights

— 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.

— 4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive part time mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. — Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when there is a fault detected with the Active Speed Limiter. — Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light This light indicates when the front and/or rear axle locker fault has been detected. — Front/Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light This light indicates when the front, rear, or both axles have been locked. The telltale will display the lock icon either on the front, rear, or both axles to indicate the current lock status.

— Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the neutral mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated. — Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front sway bar is disconnected. — 4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode. The system will provide power to all four wheels and shift the power between the front and rear axles as needed. This will provide maximum traction in dry and slippery conditions. White Indicator Lights — Two Wheel Drive High Indicator Light — If Equipped With a Premium Cluster This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two wheel drive high mode. — Active Speed Limiter ON Indicator Light — If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on, but not set. — Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light — If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on and set to a specific speed. — Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off. — Set Speed Warning Light — If Equipped When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a number matching the set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along with pop up message of speed warning exceeded. When the set speed is exceeded by 1.8 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will light up yellow and flash along with a continuous chime (up to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the

instrument cluster display, for further information refer to “Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel.” The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be set. — Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster This light will turn on when the speed control has been turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Green Indicator Lights — 4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode. The system will provide power to all four wheels and shift the power between the front and rear axles as needed. This will provide maximum traction in dry and slippery conditions. — Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light — If Equipped With A 7.0 Instrument Cluster Display This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on and set to a specific speed. — Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when the speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. — Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. — Park/Headlight On Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. — Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode. — Turn Signal Indicator Lights When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. Blue Indicator Lights — High Beam Indicator Light This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario. Gray Indicator Lights — Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster This light will turn on when the speed control has been turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. — Active Speed Limiter ON Indicator Light — If Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on, but not set.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information. Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system. WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle. (Continued) For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not

crank or start the engine. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

204 SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). You also may experience the following when ABS activates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS. WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. (Continued) SAFETY WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System Warning Light” is not on. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Electronic Brake Control System Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), and Hill Descent Control (HDC). Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) This function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle. Brake System Warning Light The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

206 SAFETY If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. SAFETY The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed. (If the doors are attached, then the door must be closed. If the doors are detached then the driver’s seatbelt must be buckled.)
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.

WARNING! There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

208 SAFETY Towing With HSA Traction Control System (TCS) HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer. This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode. WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. SAFETY ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance (Continued)

210 SAFETY WARNING! (Continued) that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. ESC Operating Modes NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off. NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return to ESC On. ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. SAFETY Full Off — If Equipped This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch. NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”. ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so equipped.

• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.

212 SAFETY ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or SAFETY evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles. NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes. WARNING! Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.

NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. WARNING! If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. Ready Alert Braking (RAB) Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.

214 SAFETY Rain Brake Support (RBS) Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that the feature is active is the torque applied to the steering wheel. NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle. Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation

conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application).

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).

Enabling HDC HDC Target Set Speeds HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range

• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).

• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• Parking brake is released.

• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• Driver door is closed. (If doors are attached, then door must be closed. if doors are detached, then driver seatbelt must be buckled.)

• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) Activating HDC Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.

216 SAFETY Driver Override The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at anytime.

• Driver door opens (Driver door opens if doors are attached or driver seatbelt is unbuckled if doors are detached). Deactivating HDC

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park. Disabling HDC HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.

• HDC detects excessive brake temperature. Feedback To The Driver The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to excess speed. SAFETY

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. WARNING! HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/ side of the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK. The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on 218 SAFETY both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. NOTE:

• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. The area on taillights, where the radar sensors are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the taillights where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds). BSM Radar Location (Driver Side Shown) The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information. SAFETY

Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.

Warning Light Location The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. Side Monitoring 220 SAFETY Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching SAFETY

Overtaking/Passing The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. Stationary Objects 222 SAFETY The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes. Opposing Traffic WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. SAFETY Rear Cross Path (RCP) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING! RCP Detection Zones Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

224 SAFETY Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime. Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)

226 SAFETY and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall system performance. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure TPMS feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor. NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. SAFETY

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. System Operation The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages, which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light 228 SAFETY Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to their original color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Service TPMS Warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. SAFETY

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size

spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does

not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a

230 SAFETY new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Vehicles With a Full Size Matching Spare

1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size

spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped with a low pressure road tire.

2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is

swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be on, a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX message to appear in the instrument cluster, and the graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value in a different color.

3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) will turn off the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold. TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display pressure SAFETY values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the ⬙SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: General Information Occupant Restraint Systems Features The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

• Seat Belt Systems This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

• Child Restraints (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child

restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the

232 SAFETY seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information).

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat

belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind

them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle

has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified

to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact information. WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the SAFETY vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. Change of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

234 SAFETY The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the (Continued) SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. (Continued) (Continued) WARNING!

236 SAFETY WARNING! (Continued)

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front

seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” SAFETY

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across

your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest

with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. 238 SAFETY Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch

plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. Adjustable Upper Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. SAFETY NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position. WARNING!

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

240 SAFETY Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. SAFETY

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (Four-Door Models) ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (Two-Door Models) If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ 242 SAFETY In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,

you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire seat belt is extracted. WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. SAFETY Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

• Front and Side Impact Sensors Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.

• Seat Belt Pretensioners The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components: Air Bag Warning Light Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

244 SAFETY The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual. SAFETY Front Air Bags This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

246 SAFETY The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a category other than a properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult. The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision. NOTE: When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated. WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air (Continued) SAFETY WARNING! (Continued) bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Front Air Bag Operation Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front Passenger Seat The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat

248 SAFETY and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a category other than a properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of The Following: Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:

• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat

• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor.

• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an amber light located on the overhead sports bar

• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the seat back in an upright position.

• Air Bag Warning Light
• Passenger Seat Belt Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether it should activate or deactivate the Seated Properly SAFETY The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects in it.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child, including a child seated in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child or small adult.
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.

Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Front Passenger Front Passenger Front Passenger Seat Occupant Advanced Air Air Bag Status Status Bag Disabled Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status Unoccupied NOT DEACTIVATED seat* Unbuckled ILLUMINATED Unoccupied “PASSENGER DEACTIVATED seat*Buckled

Grocery bags, “PASSENGER DEACTIVATED heavy briefcases, AIR BAG OFF” and other relatively light objects Rear-facing child “PASSENGER DEACTIVATED restraint**

250 SAFETY Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Front Passenger Front Passenger Front Passenger Seat Occupant Advanced Air Air Bag Status Status Bag Disabled Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status Child, including “PASSENGER DEACTIVATED a child in a

forward-facing child restraint or booster seat** Small adult “PASSENGER DEACTIVATED

Properly seated NOT ILLUMIACTIVATED adult NATED

• When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated. ** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat. WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision. When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are SAFETY placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated. The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated. The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated for most properly seated and restrained children in the passenger seat and for most properly installed child restraint systems. However, under certain conditions, even with a properly installed child restraint system, the PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even though the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”

NOTE: If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD Indicator Light will illuminate. If The Pad Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult Passenger: If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:

1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step

2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,

such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers, blankets, extra clothing, etc.

3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.

4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat,

with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the floor, and with their back against the seatback.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in

this seated position for two to three minutes after restarting the vehicle.

• If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of a collision.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult (depending on size) who is seated in the passenger seat. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. The driver and passenger must always use the PAD Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposition his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision. Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in deactivation or activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working SAFETY improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).

• Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger’s seated weight. The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:

• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

Not Seated Properly 254 SAFETY Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Not Seated Properly will illuminate whenever The Air Bag Warning Light the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status. WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision. (Continued) A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the does not air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.

• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.
• If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately. The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used. The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. SAFETY

• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by FCA US LLC. WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

258 SAFETY WARNING! Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. Side Impacts Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Location When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. SAFETY The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

260 SAFETY Air Bag System Components If A Deployment Occurs NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat SAFETY irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System. NOTE:

• Unlock the power door locks.

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• Turn off the Gasoline Fuel Pump Heater (if equipped) or the Diesel Fuel Filter Heater (if equipped).

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

• Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.
• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.

262 SAFETY Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics SAFETY

and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Child Restraints

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

264 SAFETY There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/ parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http:// www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm SAFETY

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 266 SAFETY Infant And Child Restraints WARNING! (Continued) Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. (Continued)

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. SAFETY WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,

should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of

the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the

child’s thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

268 SAFETY WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Anchors Only Anchors + Top Tether Anchor Tether Anchor

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

270 SAFETY LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models) Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models) Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH What is the weight limit (child’s 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system weight + weight of the child reuntil the combined weight of the straint) for using the LATCH anchorchild and the child restraint is 65 lbs age system to attach the child re(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether straint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Can the LATCH anchorages and the Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child attach a rear-facing or forward-facing restraint? child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.

272 SAFETY Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Can a child seat be installed in the Two Door Models- No Four Door Only: You can install child center position using the inner Four Door Models - Yes restraints with flexible lower anchors LATCH lower anchorages? in the center position. The inner anchorages are 18.5 inches (484 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position. Can two child restraints be attached Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If using a common lower LATCH anchorage? the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back of touch the back of the front passenger the front passenger seat if the child seat? restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be removed? Two Door Models- No Two Door Models — None Four Door Models - Yes Four Door Models — Center only NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it. WARNING! Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded 1 — Folded Headrest 2 — Child Restraint

274 SAFETY Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models) LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models) SAFETY

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages Two-Door Models: There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat, near the floor.

Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models) Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models) Four-Door Models: There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. 276 SAFETY Center Seat LATCH WARNING! (Continued) Two-Door Models: Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions. WARNING! This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Four-Door Models: To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. WARNING! Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you must use the seat belt for the center position. You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard positions. (Continued)

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the

tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for

that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to SAFETY move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child

restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the

top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling

back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. (Continued)

278 SAFETY WARNING! (Continued)

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. SAFETY

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Automatic Locking Retractor Locations (Four-Door Models) Automatic Locking Retractor Locations (Two-Door Models) ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 280 SAFETY Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to the with the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of the facing child restraint? child restraint. Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passenger touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is alseat? lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Can the head restraints be removed? Two Door Models- No Two Door — None Four Door Models - Yes Four Door — Center Only Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seatCan the buckle stalk be twisted to ing position with an ALR retractor. tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it. SAFETY WARNING! Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded 1 — Folded Headrest 2 — Child Restraint

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.

For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor

to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight

against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is

locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap

portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling

back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. SAFETY Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to

install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top

tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for

the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models With Center Armrest) Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door Without Center Armrest

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the

top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA. WARNING! Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models Without Center Armrest)

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the

center tether anchorage located on the back of the seat.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

286 SAFETY Exhaust Gas WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. SAFETY

Air Bag Warning Light Floor Mat Safety Information The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information. Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

WARNING! An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT

before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. (Continued) 288 SAFETY WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.

• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. (Continued) SAFETY

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

Manual Transmission — If Equipped Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. Four-Wheel Drive Models Only In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal. The “4WD Low Indicator Light” will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.

STARTING AND OPERATING 295

Normal Starting To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/ STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the

ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.

If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to

the engine starting, push the button again. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release

the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.

3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped)

and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the transmission will automatically select PARK and the engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle

speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the START/ STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode.

5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the

ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when the transmission is not in PARK. NOTE: The system will automatically time out and the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK.

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,

2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place

the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will display “ACC”),

3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time

to place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”),

4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to

return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster will display “OFF”). AutoPark AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages. WARNING!

• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster display and on the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 297

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.

• Vehicle is not in PARK AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (2.0 km/h) or less

• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
• Drivers door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is removed an additional trigger would be if the driver is off the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing).
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
• Ignition switched from RUN to OFF NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF. If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark. AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
• Drivers door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is removed an aditional trigger would be if the driver is off the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing).

• Driver’s door is removed
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster. NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired gear. If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may AutoPark. AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (2.0 km/h) or less. The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (2.0 km/h).

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (2.0 km/h), the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. 4WD LOW AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in 4WD LOW. The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Additional customer warnings will be given when both of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the Driver’s Door is closed. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the ⬙P⬙ in the instrument cluster display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended. If Engine Fails To Start WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. (Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 299

WARNING! (Continued)

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. The engine block heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray. WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. PARKING BRAKE Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear. The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever completely. Parking Brake Lever When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate. NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 301

• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION! If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. CAUTION! Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. Manual Transmission Shifter To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place the gear selector into the desired gear position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of the selector).

STARTING AND OPERATING 303

To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the gear selector all the way left and then forward. Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position. NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission. Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds Shift Pattern To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine 3.6L Speeds Accel. Cruise Manual Transmission 1 to 2 15 (24) 10 (16) Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) 2 to 3 3 to 4 24 (39) 50 (80) 19 (31) 40 (64) NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less. Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch. NOTE: Above certain speeds downshifts may be blocked and not available. 4 to 5 65 (104) 55 (88) 5 to 6 70 (112) 65 (105) WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid. CAUTION!

• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage. (Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 305

CAUTION! (Continued)

• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage. Gear Selection Maximum Speed Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION! Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift (Continued) (Continued) CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. WARNING!

STARTING AND OPERATING 307

WARNING! (Continued) the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode. NOTE: The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed. The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. Gear Selector NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. When exiting the vehicle, always:

• Apply the parking brake, Gear Ranges

• Shift the transmission into PARK, Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

• Turn the ignition OFF and,
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position. WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to (Continued) (Continued) WARNING!

STARTING AND OPERATING 311

WARNING! (Continued) touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK. NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. MANUAL (M) The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster.

STARTING AND OPERATING 313

Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift

the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required. AutoStick AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

Operation To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually shift the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in the MANUAL (M) position will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward (+) will command an upshift. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or third gear, in 4LO range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected. NOTE: When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not active.

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. Four-Position Transfer Case WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

WARNING! Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged. Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector The transfer case provides four mode positions:

• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
• 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions, such as hard-surfaced roads. NEUTRAL (N) In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L. Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine. Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads. Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 317

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. WARNING! You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. Shifting Procedures 2H To 4H Or 4H To 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever. NOTE:

• Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.

During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is normal. 4H To 4L Or 4L To 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. WARNING! Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged. Five-Position Transfer Case NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

The transfer case provides five mode positions:

• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
• 4H Auto (Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range)
• 4H PT (Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range)
• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range) For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below: Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads. 4H AUTO Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions. 4H P-T Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. NEUTRAL (N) Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). This transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode. In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L. The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position. When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine. Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. WARNING! You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

• Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case. Shifting between 2H and 4H Auto can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever. 2H/4H Auto To 4H Part Time Or 4H Part Time To 2H/4H Auto Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal. During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is normal. 4H Part Time/4H Auto To 4L Or 4L To 4H Part Time/4H Auto With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the

transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs between the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction. Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction. WARNING! WARNING! Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged. On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering column). This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:

• Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
• Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same speed. To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will illuminate), push the switch up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the “FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear axle is locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or unlock the front axle. NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked. Axle Lock Switch Panel To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button. Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The axle lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).

Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front suspension travel in off-road situations. This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering column). Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push the switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/ sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal driving conditions. WARNING! Sway Bar Switch Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. Under certain circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle stability and assists with vehicle control. The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to return to off-road mode.

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further information. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected. NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/ reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side. To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch again. WARNING! If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury.

ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING

Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the system will provide mechanical steering capability.

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system. Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool. If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and a flashing icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE:

• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.

STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the engine. NOTE: It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be disabled during off-road use.

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

Automatic Mode Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/ START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode. Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not stop: To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.

• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• Driver’s door is not closed.

• The vehicle must be completely stopped.

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved.

• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed. The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.

• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.

• Hood is open. To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

• Transfer case is in 4LO or Neutral While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.

• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure. Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:

• Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from previous auto-stop (2 mph (3 km/h) BSG, 5 mph (8 km/h) ESS

• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.

• Steering angle beyond threshold.

• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.

• ACC is on and speed is set.
• Vehicle is at high altitude
• System fault present
• Low fuel is detected It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/ START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications).

STARTING AND OPERATING 329

• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds 5 minutes.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO or Neutral mode. To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System

1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the

switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer

to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/

START system), the engine will not be stopped.

4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON

condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on. To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off. System Malfunction If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/ START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in “Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. STOP/START Off Switch If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

(IF EQUIPPED) To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur: The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Pressing the clutch pedal will automatically restart the vehicle.

• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be disabled during off-road use.

• Vehicle speed must be less 2 mph (3 km/h). Automatic Mode The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into STOP/ START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.

• The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position and the clutch pedal must be fully released The engine will shut down, the tachometer will fall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will appear, and the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) air flow will be reduced. Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. In following situations the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or greater than 109°F (43°C).

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• When driving in REVERSE. To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not require complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go into STOP/ START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

• Hood is open. Conditions that will cause the engine to start automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode

• Transfer case is in 4LO or Neutral The Engine Will Start Automatically When:

• Driver’s seat is not occupied or driver door is open.
• Vehicle is at high altitude.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.

• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.

• Forward Gear is engaged.

• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds 5 minutes.

• System fault is present.

• Battery voltage drops too low.

• Low fuel is detected.

• Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake pedal applications.

• HVAC set to MAX A/C. It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/ START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

• Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• 4LO or Neutral (transfer case)

To Manually Turn Off The Start/Stop System

1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the

switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

4. If the STOP/START system is manually turned off, the

engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the ignition switch

5. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON

condition every time the key is turned off and back on. To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off. System Malfunction STOP/START Off Switch

2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the

instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/

START system), the engine will not be stopped. If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/ START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in “Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h). The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control On/Off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. WARNING! Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. To Activate Speed Control Buttons 1 — SET+/Accel 2 — On/Off 3 — RES/Resume 4 — SET-/Decel 5 — CANC/Cancel Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Speed Control on. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

To Decrease Speed To Accelerate For Passing When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): To Resume Speed U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory. Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF, erases the set speed from memory. Using Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control. WARNING! Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations. ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster display will show the park assist ready system status. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: Rear Distance (inches/cm) Arcs — Left Arcs — Center Arcs — Right Audible Alert Chime Radio Volume Reduced WARNING ALERTS 59-47 inches 47-39 inches (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) 39-25 inches (100-65 cm) Greater than 79 inches (200 cm) None 79-59 inches (200-150 cm) None None None None None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid None None None None 3rd Flashing None None Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear center only) Yes Slow (for rear center only) Slow (for rear center only) Fast (for rear center only) Yes Yes Yes

25-12 inches (65-30 cm) 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing Fast Yes Less than 12 inches (30 cm) 1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the climate controls. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System ParkSense Switch When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense. If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.

• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense OFF, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

• The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deactivated when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the vehicle’s tow hook socket. The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the trailer’s cable plug is removed. WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle in the center of the spare tire. NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera Zone Red Yellow Green image will continue to be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position. When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/ receiver. When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone: Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle

0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)

6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE

Fuel Filler Cap The fuel filler cap is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle. CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. Fuel Filler Door

STARTING AND OPERATING 345

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. Fuel Filler Cap NOTE: WARNING!

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

• Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off. VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar. This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension

STARTING AND OPERATING 347

components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed. Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR. Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added. Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION! Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Common Towing Definitions The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

STARTING AND OPERATING 349

rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. Tongue Weight (TW) The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 351

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Engine/ Transmission 2.0L 3.6L GCWR Max. GTW (Gross ComModel Frontal Area (Gross Trailer bined Wt. Wt.) Rating) Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs 636 kg) (907 kg) Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1 682 kg) 587 kg) Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs 636 kg) (907 kg) Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1 682 kg) 587 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note) 200 lbs (91 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. Towing Requirements — Tires

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

STARTING AND OPERATING 353

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision. CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area. Seven-Pin Connector

Battery Backup Lamps Right Stop/Turn Electric Brakes 5 — Ground 6 — Left Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps Towing Tips Four-Pin Connector 1 — Female Pins 2 — Male Pin 3 — Ground 4 — Park 5 — Left Stop/Turn 6 — Right Stop/Turn Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic. If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage.

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking. AutoStick — If Equipped
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: City Driving When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. Highway Driving Reduce speed. Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheels OFF the Ground NONE

Dolly Tow On Trailer Front Rear ALL Four-Wheel Drive Models See Instructions Automatic transmission in PARK. Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]). Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N). Tow in forward direction. NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N), automatic transmission must be in PARK, and manual transmission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. CAUTION!

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result. (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged. Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing. WARNING! You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or

depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

4. Turn the engine OFF.

5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).

6. Start the engine.

7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual

transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.

9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.

10. Turn the engine OFF.

11. Firmly apply the parking brake.

12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual

transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL). CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.

13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable

14. Release the parking brake.

Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Start the engine.

5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

On-Road Driving Tips

6. Turn the engine OFF.

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than conventional passenger cars.

7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.

NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash.

8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place

manual transmission in NEUTRAL.

9. Release the brake pedal.

10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

11. Start the engine.

12. Press and hold the brake pedal.

13. Release the parking brake.

14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal

(and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in offroad conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

2. Remove both nuts from the underside of the vehicle for

each bracket. NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be removed to prevent damage if so equipped.

1. There are two studs on the bodyside of each connecting

bracket. Underside Nuts

3. Remove the side step assembly.

STARTING AND OPERATING 361

Bumper End Cap Removal The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper can be removed by following the steps below:

1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket

(Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not remove the bolts.

2. Remove the remaining 8 bolts. The end cap can now be

3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and store it

where it will not get damaged.

4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.

The Basics Of Off-Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over. NOTE: It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be disabled during off-road use. CAUTION! Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire. WARNING! Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road situation. When To Use 4L (Low) Range When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low speed pulling power. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

CAUTION! CAUTION! Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result. On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control. Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline. Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Overrevving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum. Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should use second gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.

Sand Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points) Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure. While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object. CAUTION! Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. WARNING! Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 365

Using A Spotter Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide you through. When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45-degree angle. Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires. CAUTION!

• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills. WARNING! There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.

Crossing Logs CAUTION! To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes. CAUTION! Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high-centered. Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage. Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle. Getting High-Centered Before Climbing A Steep Hill If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object. As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

Driving Up Hill Driving Downhill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes. Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock. WARNING! Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury. WARNING! Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured or killed.

Driving Across An Incline If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down. WARNING! Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury. If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock. WARNING! If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or down. Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible manner. You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment. You should know your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it.

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion. CAUTION!

• Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle components, and your brakes will be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
• When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water, you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross. Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow method.

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! WARNING! Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator. Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning. Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body. Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current, the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique. After Driving Off-Road Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible. NOTE: Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual transmission bell housing for mud and debris and clean as required. WARNING! Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .374

ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery. Assist And SOS Mirror If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a SOS button.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375

WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues. SOS Call

1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.

NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.

2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS

buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a SOS operator has been made.

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS

operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:

• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator

through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed. WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.

5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate

emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF

YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR

ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER

AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,

APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL

• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you. (Continued) SOS Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities. SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash. WARNING!

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.

• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately. Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs Interior Bulbs Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp Heater Control Lamps (2) Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe) Soundbar Dome Lamp ** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer. Bulb Number

Exterior Bulbs Headlamps (2) Premium Head Lamps Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp Front Side Marker Lamps (2) Base Fog Lamps Bulb Number H13 LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) 7442NALL LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) 7440NA LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) PSX24W

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381

Premium Fog Lamps Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp License Lamp LED – LED – LED – LED – LED – Bulb Number (Serviced At Authorized (Serviced At Authorized

(Serviced At Authorized (Serviced At Authorized (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Dealer) Dealer) Dealer) Dealer) NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. Bulb Replacement NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. Halogen Headlamps

1. Open hood and support using prop rod.

2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the top

1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.

3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side

and working toward the other.

4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to the

5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.

6. Remove the lamp from the collar.

7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

8. Pull the bulb from the housing.

9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.

10. Remove connector from bulb.

11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the

connector locking tab to the lock position. CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn clockwise.

Front Park/Turn Signal

1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access bulb

sockets. Wheel Liner

2. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise and

remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace. LED Front Side Marker

1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access side

maker screw and electrical connector.

2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the front side

maker assembly and disconnect electrical connector.

3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light assembly.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383

Halogen Front Fog Lamp LED Front Fog Lamp

1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front

fog lamp. If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are replaced as an assembly.

2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front

fog lamp connector receptacle. Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp

3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and

squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing.

1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access single retaining

screw for tail lamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the

housing and then connect the replacement bulb.

CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. Trim Cap

384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect electrical connector, then remove tail lamp assembly from the vehicle.

NOTE: If necessary, push in on the assembly tab located inboard behind the lamp housing. Assembly Bracket

4. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise, then remove it from the housing.

5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.

3. Remove the three screws from assembly bracket to

access bulb sockets.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the LED Assembly from an authorized dealer.

1. Remove the spare tire.

2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier cover.

3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly and disconnect

electrical connector. License Plate Lamps See an authorized dealer to replace these LED assemblies. FUSES WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

General Information Power Distribution Center (PDC) The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover is labelled with each serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and size. When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge. Power Distribution Center Blade Fuses 1 — Fuse Element 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element. 3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown fuse).

UCI Port (USB & AUX) HIFI Amplifier Spare Spare

HVAC CTRL MOD/SCL/OCM/DPDM

• Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON. Description

SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD

• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear cargo area. To remove jack and tools proceed as follows:

2. Remove the hardware storage cover by pinching the

latch on the left side and pulling upward.

1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.

Hardware Storage Cover Latch Load Floor NOTE: The load floor can be removed for easier access by pulling the load floor directly rearward.

3. Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise to

loosen the jack from the storage bin. Plastic Wing Nut Location

4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.

1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire

1. Mount the spare tire onto the carrier. Torque down lug

nuts and locking lug nut.

2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning the lock bolt

to the left with the #T40 Torx head driver and ratchet from the supplied tool kit.

2. Reinstall the camera cover and the return lock bolt to the

lock position with the provided tools.

3. Reinstall the tire cover if applicable.

NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross weight of 85 lbs (38.5 kg) including the weight of the spare tire. Preparations For Jacking

1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING! Unlock Rear Camera Cover

3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them

counterclockwise. If equipped, remove the locking lug nut with the lock key (located in the glove box) turning it counterclockwise. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Apply the parking brake.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397

4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual

transmission into REVERSE.

5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.

2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by

turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack

handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench. Jack Warning Label CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored

location. Assembled Jack And Tools

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399

4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle.

Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.

Rear Jacking Location Front Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.

Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

11. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.

7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install

the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.

12. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the spare tire carrier. Torque down lug nuts and locking lug nut.

WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.

8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,

and remove the jack.

9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for correct lug nut torque.

10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.

13. Reinstall the camera cover and return the lock bolt to

the lock position by turning the lock to the right using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401

Road Tire Installation

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end

of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a

torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING! Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available. Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Remove the manual park release cover, located above

the gear selector, to access the release tether strap.

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether

strap up through the opening in the console base. Manual Park Release Cover Tether Strap

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until the release

lever locks into place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403

1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the

2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward and to

the right, into its original position.

3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the

lever is locked in its stowed position.

4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console, and

reinstall the cover. JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. WARNING! Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.

404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the engine compartment, behind the Power Distribution Center. WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL)

and turn the ignition to LOCK. Positive Battery Post NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical

3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405

WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump Starting Procedure WARNING! Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery. Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while making connections.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CAUTION! Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000 rpm since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel and can damage booster vehicle engine.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in

the reverse sequence: Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from

the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from

the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive

(+) post of the discharged vehicle. If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system tested at an authorized dealer. CAUTION! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407

CAUTION! WARNING! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

• For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
• Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE Front Rear ALL 4WD MODELS See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”.

• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED BEST METHOD

410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position. If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle. CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. Four–Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly. If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions. CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are mounted in the front and the rear. NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow strap. WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury. CAUTION! Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

SCHEDULED SERVICING Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. On non-instrument cluster display equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Warning And Indicator Lights” or “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmission, and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights Maintenance Plan Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Change oil and filter Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary. Additional Inspections Inspect the CV/Universal joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. Inspect transfer case fluid. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter. Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine** Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine** Flush and replace the engine, intercooler (if equipped), battery (if equipped), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if equipped) coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423

Checking Oil Level To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a warmed up engine has been shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the crosshatch zone will result in a reading at the top of the crosshatch zone on these engines. CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. WARNING! Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to (Continued)

424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) (Continued) DEALER SERVICE An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425

WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Engine Oil Selection 3.6L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol Engine Oil Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340. This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L Engine Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-13340 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427

or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” maintenance interval if applicable. WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement — Gasoline Engine Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.

2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

1. Loosen the retainers from the air cleaner cover using a

suitable tool. Air Cleaner Filter Cover Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 — Retainers 2 — Air Filter Cover

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429

3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing

2. Tighten air cleaner cover retainers using a suitable tool.

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection WARNING! Air Cleaner Filter 1 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface 2 — Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.

1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing

assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.

• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not

normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation) Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment. Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. Air Conditioner Maintenance Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s information kit, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If Equipped R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter) WARNING! Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/ RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury. The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.

2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and

lower the door. Glove Compartment Travel Stop

3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433

4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the air filter

access door to the HVAC housing.

5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet housing.

Pull the filter elements out pinching them to the right for clearance.

Air Filter Retaining Tabs Air Filter

6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position

indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.

434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION! The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.

7. Close A/C Air Filter access door and secure retaining

8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position

ensuring you have properly engaged the travel damper. Travel Dampener 1 — Travel Dampener Housing 2 — Travel Dampener Rod Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435

Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the

glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

• Deformation Or Fatigue If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged. Wiper Blade Removal/Installation CAUTION! Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position

Wiper Blade Cover Wiper Arm Release Tab

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437

2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, raise

the cover, press the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper

blade from the wiper arm.

4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Installing The Front Wipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is

in the full up position.

2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the

3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the

opening in the wiper blade.

4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm,

latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click then close the cover. Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position

Wiper Blade Wiper Arm J Hook J Hook Retainer Cover

5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Open tailgate to access the wiper arm.

2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate wiper blade

outward to disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm. Rear Wiper Assembly 1 — Wiper Arm 2 — Wiper Blade Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper Arm 2 — Wiper Blade

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439

3. Gently set the arm on the glass.

Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle Installing The Rear Wiper

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.

2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the

end of the wiper arm and rotate the wiper in to place.

3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the tail gate.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information. (Continued)

440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! (Continued)

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441

Cooling System WARNING!

• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode. Coolant Checks Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if equipped), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if equipped) coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if equipped), and MGU (if equipped) coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core. Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if equipped), and MGU (if equipped) cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an local authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).

442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. NOTE:

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443

Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact a local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445

Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant should be within the OK range between the ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.

1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine

2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.

3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle without

4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant

level on the dipstick. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points To Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. Brake System

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing. In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. WARNING!

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447

pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for leaks. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. Front/Rear Axle Fluid For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.

Fluid Level Check Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole. This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position. NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by the axles Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above. Drain And Refill Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. Manual Transmission Selection Of Lubricant Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Selection Of Lubricant Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449

Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals. Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service station. TIRES Tire Safety Information CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. Tire Markings 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453

EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE:

DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455

Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457

Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare

tires. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— Metric Example For Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tires — General Information WARNING! (Continued) Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. (Continued) NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461

Fuel Economy CAUTION! Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not judgement when determining proper may look properly inflated even when inflated. a good quality make a visual inflation. Tires they are under-

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation

462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Radial Ply Tires WARNING! Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Tire Spinning Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. WARNING!

Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Tire Tread 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465

WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering (Continued)

466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! (Continued) and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. Tire Types All Season Tires — If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire Summer tires only in sets of four; failure adversely affect the safety and handling of designation or sidewall. Use to do so may your vehicle.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467

WARNING! Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Spare Tires — If Equipped NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for

your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING! Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Full Size Spare — If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped Wheel And Wheel Trim Care The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch. WARNING! Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. CAUTION! Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking. Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. Tire Chains (Traction Devices) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• 245/75R17 tire with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S” specification is recommended.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471

WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. CAUTION! To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. (Continued)

• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Tire Rotation Recommendations The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross” shown in the following diagram.

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear Tire Rotation CAUTION! Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear. The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473

Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Grades The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:

• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities. Protection From Atmospheric Agents

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. Body And Underbody Maintenance The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. What Causes Corrosion? Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Preserving The Bodywork The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar. Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interior trim and top, follow these precautions:

• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim.
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material, as damage may result.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make sure it is completely dry before lowering.
• Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top Windows.” Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent, or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top, but support the top from underneath. Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.
• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477

Care Of Fabric Top Windows Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions:

• When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly.

• Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the window, not up and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing.

• Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road driving will have an impact on plastic retainer operation. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window plastic retainer operation. To maintain ease of use of the window plastic retainers, each window plastic retainer should be cleaned and lubricated regularly. Clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products are available through an authorized dealer.

• When washing, never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.

• Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may damage the windows.

• Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.

2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.

INTERIORS Carpet Removal Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):

1. Remove the front grommets.

Front Carpet Pulled Away Front Carpet 1 — Grommets

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479

3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for the

rear carpet and then the front carpet.

4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet split

and then pull out the rear edge and slide the carpet to the front (do not remove the harness).

Front And Rear Carpet Split Rear Underside Of Front Seat 1 — Harness 2 — Carpet Split

480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket and

then remove the last two grommets. Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):

1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left and

2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the carpet

split around the front seats brackets. Front Seat And Floor 1 — Grommets 2 — Carpet Split

6. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets. Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle 1 — Carpet Split

3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and

one right). First the grommet for the cargo carpet and then the rear carpet.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481

4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet split

around the rear seats brackets. Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):

1. Remove the rear seats.

2. Remove the sides grommets (one left and one right).

First the grommet from the side carpet and then the rear carpet.

Under Rear Seat 1 — Carpet Split

5. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets. Side Carpet 1 — Grommet

3. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left and

4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet

split around the front seats brackets. Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):

1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and

2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet split

around the seat belt attachment. Pull Carpet To The Rear 1 — Carpet Split 2 — Rear Carpet

5. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets. Under Rear Seat 1 — Carpet Split 2 — Rear Carpet

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483

3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and the side

support and then pull the carpet out. Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap Hider:

1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and

2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet split

around the seat belt attachment and under the center seat bracket.

Rear Load Floor 1 — Side Supports 2 — Load Floor

4. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets. Under Rear Seat 1 — Carpet Split 2 — Grommets 3 — Rear Carpet

484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets. Side Carpet (Four Door Models):

3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.

1. Remove the side grommet (one left and one right).

Side Carpet (Two Door Models):

2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then all

around the perimeter and open the carpet split around the seat belt attachment.

1. Remove the side grommet and then the lower one (left

and right). Inside Sidewall 1 — Top Flange 2 — Grommet 3 — Side Carpet

2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then all

around the perimeter and open the carpet split around the seat belt attachment.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485

Seats And Fabric Parts Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Seat Belt Maintenance Inside Sidewall

3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets. Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). Plastic And Coated Parts Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. CAUTION!

• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be

used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Leather Parts Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487

NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the A pillar, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears underbody, on the right side of the frame rail near the center of the vehicle, as well as on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of the engine block. Torque Specifications Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket. Lug Nut/Bolt Torque 130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) **Lug Nut/Bolt Size M14 x 1.50 Lug Nut/Bolt Socket Size 22 mm **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/ bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. Vehicle Identification Number TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 491 Spare Tire Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque 59 Ft-Lbs (80 N·m) **Lug Nut/Bolt Size M14 x 1.50 Lug Nut/Bolt Socket Size 22 mm Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway). Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier located on the tailgate.

Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. Wheel Mounting Surface 492 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WARNING! octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2.0L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations, and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. For optimal performance the use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is recommended in these engines. While operating on gasoline with the required octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended 3.6L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 493 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Materials Added To Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol. CAUTION! DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, (Continued) 494 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CAUTION! (Continued) cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 495 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

• Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Metric

Engine Component Engine Coolant Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit (if equipped) Battery Coolant (if equipped) Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Fully Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 499 Component Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. 87 Octane Minimum – 91 Octane Recommended, 0-15% Ethanol. 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol. Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not (Continued) (Continued)

500 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CAUTION! (Continued) be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. Chassis Component Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Manual Transmission – If Equipped Transfer Case Axle Differential (Front) Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 501 Component Axle Differential (Rear) Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5). Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive. We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4, Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

UCONNECT SYSTEMS For detailed information about your Uconnect system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.

DRAG & DROP MENU BAR

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps: Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an

506 MULTIMEDIA CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly. Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed. WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. MULTIMEDIA

• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates. The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”. Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect touchscreen. Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate. Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on. Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

508 MULTIMEDIA Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3 Settings Push the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and make your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in the “MAR/RUN” position. The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting. MULTIMEDIA

Display After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Display Mode Brightness Selectable Options Auto

NOTE: The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen. Language English Français Español NOTE: Selecting any option within the “Language” setting will change the language for all displayed nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touchscreen Beep

510 MULTIMEDIA Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Units

Selectable Options Metric Custom NOTE:

• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar) units of measure independently. Clock & Date After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Set Time and Format 12 hour Selectable Options 24 hour

Off Safety/Assistance After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped Selectable Options

Off NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

512 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display Rear ParkSense Volume — Low Medium High If Equipped Front ParkSense Volume — Low Medium High If Equipped Blind Spot Alert — Off Lights Lights and Chime If Equipped NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification. MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped Auto Park Brake Off Selectable Options Lights

Lights and Chime Off Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Headlight Off Delay 0 sec Selectable Options 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec NOTE: When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. Automatic High Beam HeadOn Off lamps — If Equipped Daytime Running Lights Yes Flash Lights With Lock — Off If Equipped

NOTE: The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen. Doors & Locks After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto Door Locks Selectable Options

Off NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Auto Unlock On Exit Off NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Flash Lights With Lock Horn With Lock Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock

Off Off Off Driver All NOTE: When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).

516 MULTIMEDIA Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Off Selectable Options Remote Start All Starts NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on. Engine Off Options After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Headlight Off Delay 0 sec Selectable Options 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec NOTE: When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. MULTIMEDIA

Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Equalizer Bass Selectable Options Mid Treble NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting. Balance/Fade Up Arrow Down ArLeft Arrow Right ArCenter “C” Button row Button Button row Button Button NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button” on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off

Off NOTE: The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled. AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

NOTE: The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Paired Phones Selectable Options List of Paired Phones NOTE: This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. MULTIMEDIA

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Channel Skip Selectable Options List of Channels NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. Subscription Info Sirius ID NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the

screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.

Cancel NOTE: When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Clear Personal Data Selectable Options

Cancel NOTE: When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. MULTIMEDIA Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4 Settings

Press the “Settings” button on the bottom bar, or press the ” button, then press the “Settings” button on “Apps the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE:

• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Touchscreen and Faceplate Buttons 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting.

522 MULTIMEDIA Language After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Language English Selectable Options Espanol Francais Display After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Display Mode Display Brightness Headlights On Display Brightness Headlights Off AutoShow Selectable Options Auto

Selectable Options Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Units

Selectable Options Metric Custom NOTE:

• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Distance, Fuel Consumption” (MPG (US), MPG(UK), L/100km, or km/L),“Pressure” (kPa, or bar) and “Temperature” (C, or F) units of measure independently.

524 MULTIMEDIA Voice After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Voice Response Length Show Command List Selectable Options Brief Always Detailed With Help Never Time & Date After pressing the “Time & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Set Time Hours NOTE: The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. Set Time Minutes NOTE: The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. Time Format Selectable Options

Camera After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If Equipped NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines — If Equipped

526 MULTIMEDIA Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped After pressing the “Safety/Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name ParkSense — If Equipped Rear ParkSense Volume Rain Sensing Auto Wipers Sound Low Selectable Options Sound and Display Medium High Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Interior Ambient Lights Selectable Options

NOTE: The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen. Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec NOTE: When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

Selectable Options NOTE: When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night. Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped Doors & Locks After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto Door Locks — If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

528 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Auto Unlock On Exit Selectable Options NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. Flash Lights With Lock Driver Door Remote Door Unlock Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped All Doors Engine Off Options — If Equipped After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Doors On Engine Off Power Delay Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay Headlight Off Delay Selectable Options

Aux Switches After pressing the “Aux Switches” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Aux 1-4 Selectable Options Type Power Source Recalled Last State Latching Battery Momentary Ignition NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition. Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Balance & Fade

Selectable Options Speaker Icon NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Balance & Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon” toward any location in the box. 530 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Equalizer Bass Selectable Options Mid Treble NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off

Loudness Yes NOTE: The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled. AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Auto Play Off NOTE: The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on. MULTIMEDIA

Phone After pressing the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Do Not Disturb Paired Phones And Audio Devices Selectable Options Do Not Distrurb Options List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices NOTE: This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Channel Skip

Selectable Options List Of Channels NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. 532 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Subscription Info Selectable Options Sirius ID NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the

screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription. Restore Settings After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Restore Settings Selectable Options

NOTE: When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings. Cancel MULTIMEDIA

Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Clear Personal Data Selectable Options

Cancel NOTE: When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.

534 MULTIMEDIA Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4/4C NAV Settings Press the “Apps ” button, then press the “Settings ” button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE:

• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. Uconnect 4/4C NAV Touchscreen and Faceplate Buttons 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 4/4C NAV radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting. MULTIMEDIA

Display After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Display Mode Display Brightness With Headlights ON Selectable Options Manual

NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions. Display Brightness With Headlights OFF NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions. Set Theme NOTE: When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.

536 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Set Language Selectable Options NOTE: When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. Touchscreen Beep Control Screen Time-Out NOTE: When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster NOTE: When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the Instrument Cluster Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. MULTIMEDIA

Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Units

Selectable Options Metric Custom NOTE:

• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L), “Pressure” (kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measure independently. Voice After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Voice Response Length Show Command List

NOTE: The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. Set Time Minutes NOTE: The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. Time Format 12hrs 24hrs Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped MULTIMEDIA

Camera After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If Equipped NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines — If Equipped

540 MULTIMEDIA Safety & Driving Assistance After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name ParkSense — If Equipped Front ParkSense Volume Rear ParkSense Volume Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Sound Only Low Low Off Selectable Options Sound and Display Medium High Medium High Lights Lights & Chime NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification. Rain Sensing Auto Wipers Mirror and Wipers After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Rain Sensing Auto Wipers Tilt Mirrors in Reverse Selectable Options

Off Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Headlight Off Delay 0 sec Selectable Options 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec NOTE: When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. Daytime Running Lights Yes Flash Lights With Lock — Off If Equipped Interior Ambient Lights NOTE: The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen.

542 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE: When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. Doors & Locks After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto Unlock On Exit Selectable Options NOTE: When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, and the driver’s door is opened. Flash Lights With Lock Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press MULTIMEDIA Setting Name 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door

Selectable Options All Doors NOTE: When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob). Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped NOTE: The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

544 MULTIMEDIA Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Off Selectable Options Remote Start All Starts NOTE: When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. Aux Switches — If Equipped After pressing the “Aux Switches” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Aux 1-4 Type Power Source Recalled Last State Selectable Options Latching Battery Momentary Ignition NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition. MULTIMEDIA

Engine Off Options After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Doors On Engine Off Power Delay Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay Headlight Off Delay Selectable Options

Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Balance/Fade Selectable Options Speaker Icon NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon” toward any location in the box.

546 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Equalizer Bass Selectable Options Mid Treble NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off

Surround Sound — If Equipped Off AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Paired Phones Selectable Options List Of Paired Phones NOTE: This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Paired Audio Sources

Selectable Options List Of Paired Audio Sources NOTE: This feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Channel Skip Selectable Options List Of Channels NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

548 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Subscription Info Selectable Options Sirius ID NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the

screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription. Restore Settings After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Restore Settings Selectable Options

NOTE: When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings. Cancel MULTIMEDIA

Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Clear Personal Data Selectable Options

Cancel NOTE: When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.

550 MULTIMEDIA System Information After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Software Licenses Selectable Options Software Information Screen NOTE: When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for the radio. Map Update Download System Information To Generate Request Code USB NOTE: The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. Whereas the “Generate Request Code” will display a code for the user to input online when downloading the maps. MULTIMEDIA

Your vehicle is equipped with Off Road Pages, which provides the vehicle status while operating on off road conditions. It supplies information relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll of the vehicle (if equipped). To access Off Road Pages, press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, and then select “Off Road Pages”. Main Menu 1 — Off Road Pages App 2 — Uconnect Apps Button

552 MULTIMEDIA Off Road Pages has the following selectable pages:

• Accessory Gauge Off Road Pages Status Bar The Off Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom of Off Road Pages and is present in each of the three selectable page options. It provides continually updating information for the following items:
• Current Transfer Case Status
• Current Latitude/Longitude
• Current Altitude of the vehicle
• Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h) Status Bar 2WD/4WD

Drivetrain The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain. The following information is displayed:

• Steering angle in degrees
• Status of Transfer Case
• Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD

Steering Angle Sway Bar Front Axle Locker Status Rear Axle Locker Status

554 MULTIMEDIA Pitch And Roll The Pitch And Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide a visualization of the current vehicle angle. Pitch And Roll Menu 2WD/4WD 1 — Current Pitch 2 — Current Roll MULTIMEDIA

Accessory Gauges The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage. Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD

Coolant Temperature Oil Temperature Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only) Battery Voltage Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmissions Only)

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch decreases the volume. Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/CD/ USB/AUX, etc.). The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode. Radio Operation Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button. MULTIMEDIA

AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

The Media Hub is located on the Instrument Panel, below the Climate Controls. Behind the Media Hub access door contains one AUX port, a Type C USB Port and one standard USB Port. Both USB Ports allow you to play music from iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle’s sound system.

For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port and another device is plugged into the Type C port, connection to the Type A port will be lost. Alternatively, if a device is plugged into the Type C port and another device is plugged into the Type A port, the Type C device maintains primary connection. The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off. NOTE:

• The Type C USB port is the primary media port for the radio. Two devices can be plugged in at the same time and both ports provide charging capabilities, but only one port can transfer data to the head unit at a time.

• Both ports share a single data connection. However, the user cannot switch between Type A or Type C. USB Connection 1 — Type A Plugged In 2 — Type C Plugged In 3 — Type A And Type C Plugged In 558 MULTIMEDIA Media Hub 1 — AUX Port 2 — Type C USB Port 3 — Type A USB Port Located inside the center console, a second USB Port allows you to play music from iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle’s sound system. Center Console USB MULTIMEDIA

A third and fourth USB Ports are located behind the center console, above the Power Inverter. One is a charge only port, and can only charge USB devices. The other USB Port allows you to play music from iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle’s sound system. Device Plugged In Message Screen USB On The Back Of The Center Console 1 — Type C And Standard USB Ports 2 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports

560 MULTIMEDIA Phone Plugged In Message Screen Phone or USB Plugged In Message Screen NOTE: Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the connection to a previous device to be lost. WARNING! Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in a collision. MULTIMEDIA

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped). Regulatory And Safety Information USA/CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Introducing Uconnect Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or Uconnect 4/4C NAV system.

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1. Increase the separation between the equipment and

2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio

technician for help. Uconnect 3 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 Uconnect 4/4C NAV If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps menus, of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4 with 8.4-inch display system.

564 MULTIMEDIA Get Started All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and

feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing

straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first

push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts

by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category. Uconnect Voice Command Buttons — If Equipped 1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For 8.4-inch Displays Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions. 3 — Push To End Call MULTIMEDIA Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. Push the VR button . After the beep, say:

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.

• “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say:

• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”

Uconnect 3 Radio 566 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect 4 Radio Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio MULTIMEDIA

Media Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.

• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “ Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical” TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed. Uconnect 3 Media

568 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect 4 Media Uconnect 4/4C NAV Media MULTIMEDIA

Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. Push the Phone button following commandsѧ . After the beep, say one of the

• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)” Uconnect 3 Phone

• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)” TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone and say “Call,” then pronounce the name button exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call John Smith work.”

570 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect 4 Phone Uconnect 4/4C NAV Phone MULTIMEDIA Voice Text Reply Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say “ Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the

. After the beep, say: “ Reply.” Phone button

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these four simple steps:

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat

one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY

Yes. Stuck in traffic. Start without No. me. Okay. Where are you? Are you there Call me. yet? I need I’ll call you later. directions. I’m on my way. Can’t talk right now. I’m lost. RESPONSES See you later. I’ll be late.

I will be <number> minutes late. See you in <number> of minutes. Thanks. iPhone Notification Settings

Select “Settings” Select “Bluetooth” Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle Turn On “Show Notifications” 572 MULTIMEDIA TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message. Climate Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.) . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands:

• “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees” TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. Uconnect 4/4C NAV Climate Navigation (4C NAV) The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect 4C with 8.4–inch display system.)

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button

beep, say: . After the MULTIMEDIA

• For the Uconnect 4 System, say: “ Enter state.” SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — If Equipped

• For the 4C NAV Uconnect System, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.” . After

CAUTION! Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device. NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started. NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. SOS Call Theft Alarm Notification Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation Remote Door Lock/Unlock

3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM

Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web. Remote Vehicle Start**

• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian. Remote Horn & Lights

• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ ca. Send & Go Vehicle Finder Roadside Assistance Call Vehicle Health Reports** Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV) Vehicle Health Alert** Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need your attention. For further information, refer to your owner’s manual. Performance Pages Plus** **If vehicle is equipped. Register (4C NAV) To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle

2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.

MULTIMEDIA Mobile App (4C NAV) You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands.

• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers. NOTE: For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) Mobile App To use the Uconnect App:
• Download the Uconnect App to your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely. Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.) . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands:
• “Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “Show extended weather”

576 MULTIMEDIA TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful requests. SiriusXM Travel Link Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and will respond back to confirm your requests. The system is Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free Available MULTIMEDIA

Android Auto — If Equipped Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factoryprovided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:

• Additional Apps Android Auto On 7-inch Display

578 MULTIMEDIA Apple CarPlay — If Equipped Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:

• Phone Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.

• Additional Apps MULTIMEDIA

Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.

580 MULTIMEDIA General Information Additional Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: © 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French) SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,

or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high. NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged, (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem. Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know. Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 585 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA US LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: (877) 426-5337 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC P.O. Box 191857 San Juan 00919-1857 Tel.: (888) 242-6342 Fax: (787) 782-3345

586 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 587 WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

588 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE In Canada Diagnostic Procedure Manuals If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Owner’s Manuals These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call toll free at:

EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 18JL-126-AA ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. First Edition Printed in the U.S.A.